Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 703

MM COURSE: MASTER

BSNL

USER MANUAL: Master


Version:1.0

01/09/2010

Page | 1

MM COURSE: MASTER
Table of Contents
1.

Material Master ...................................................................................................................................... 4

1.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM ..................................................................................................4

2.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP .................................................................................................44

3.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN ...................................................................................................79

4.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV..................................................................................................116

5.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL ..................................................................................................153

6.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN ...............................................................................................190

7.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS ................................................................................................227

8.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT ...................................................................................................264

9.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT...............................................................................................301

10.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL ...........................................................................................338

11.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM ............................................................................................373

12.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC ............................................................................................410

13.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA ...........................................................................................447

14.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI ............................................................................................480

15.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS ............................................................................................512

16.

MM-MM02-Material-Change ....................................................................................................549

17.

MM-MM03-Material-Display ....................................................................................................557

18.

MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes......................................................................................563

19.

MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material.........................................................................568

2.

3.

Service Master ................................................................................................................................... 574

1.

MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display ....................................................................................574

2.

MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display ..........................................................................................581

3.

MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create ..........................................................................589

4.

MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change...........................................................................598

5.

MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display ...........................................................................603


Vendor Master ................................................................................................................................... 608

Page | 2

MM COURSE: MASTER
1.

MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally) ............................................................................................608

2.

MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally) ...........................................................................................625

3.

MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally) ...........................................................................................634

4.

MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally) .........................................................................................642

5.

MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally) ..............................................................................................649

6.

MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion ..............................................................................................654

7.

MM-MKVZ-List Display ..................................................................................................................659

8.

MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance........................................................663

9.

MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance ...............................................................665

4.

Price Info Record ............................................................................................................................... 669

1.

MM-ME11-Info Record-Create......................................................................................................669

2.

MM-ME12-Info Record-Change ....................................................................................................679

3.

MM-ME13-Info Record-Display.....................................................................................................690

5.

Source List ......................................................................................................................................... 695

1.

MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain ...................................................................................................695

2.

MM-ME03-Source List-Display ......................................................................................................698

3.

MM-ME0M-Source List for Material .............................................................................................701

Page | 3

MM COURSE: MASTER

1. Material Master
1.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which
department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered at
different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction
is used rather than the Change Material transaction.

Page | 4

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Required as using external numbers.

Industry Sector

Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select ZADM for Material


Type Admin Material
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 5

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will

be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 6

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 7

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 8

User Action and Values


Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System will
assign a new no for the
material
Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZADM or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes


Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.

Page | 9

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast

Forecast profile

Page | 10

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
prof.

forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Press Enter.

Page | 11

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 12

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, or,
O
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 13

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 14

MM COURSE: MASTER
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 15

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 16

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 17

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Page | 18

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 19

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 20

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 21

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 22

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 23

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description

Number of days required to


obtain material obtained
externally

R/O
/C
O

Press Enter.

Page | 24

User Action and Values

Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 25

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Press Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Press Enter.

Page | 26

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 27

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 28

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant Specific Old material
number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Number

Press Enter.

Page | 29

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 30

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 31

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 32

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Press Enter.

Page | 33

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 34

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Press Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this


material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable

Page | 35

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 36

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 37

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page | 38

MM COURSE: MASTER

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 39

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
master record.

Press Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 40

MM COURSE: MASTER

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 41

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Press Enter.

Page | 42

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 43

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
2.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP )
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which
department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered at
different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction
is used rather than the Change Material transaction.

Page | 44

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


N/A as there is an internal number assignment.

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZCAP for Material Type


Capital Items
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA, PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 45

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 46

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 47

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 48

User Action and Values


System will assign a new
number
Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZCAP or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes


Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 49

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 50

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press enter.

On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,


enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 51

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 52

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 53

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Part Number to be maintained

Page | 54

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Enter only if different from


base UOM and required by

Page | 55

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
If defined
here, ordering

MM COURSE: MASTER
Vendor

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

Section Heading

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Page | 56

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be
different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for

MM COURSE: MASTER
Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 57

Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 58

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 59

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 60

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 61

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Press Enter.

Page | 62

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 63

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Availability
Check

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Press Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Page | 64

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 65

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant Specific Old material
number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Number

Press Enter.

Page | 66

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 67

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 68

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 69

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values

Comments

defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this


material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable

Page | 70

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 71

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 72

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page | 73

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 74

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:
Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 75

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.

Page | 76

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Press Enter.

Page | 77

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 78

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
3.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 79

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZCN for Material Type


Consumable
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 80

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 81

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 82

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 83

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZCN or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes


Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 84

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 85

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 86

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 87

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 88

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Part Number to be maintained

Page | 89

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 90

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 91

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 92

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 93

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 94

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 95

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 96

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 97

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished

R/O/C
R

Page | 98

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

MM COURSE: MASTER
Lead Time

Cross project

product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Press Enter.

Page | 99

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 100

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page | 101

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 102

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determine.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 103

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table
:

Page | 104

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Press Enter.

Page | 105

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Page | 106

User Action and Values

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

MM COURSE: MASTER
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Press Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

Page | 107

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 108

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.

Page | 109

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page | 110

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 111

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 112

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 113

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Press Enter.

Page | 114

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 115

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
4.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 116

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZCV for Material Type


Civil
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 117

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 118

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 119

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 120

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZCV or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 121

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 122

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press enter.

On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,


enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 123

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 124

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 125

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Part Number to be maintained

Page | 126

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 127

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 128

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 129

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 130

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 131

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 132

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 133

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Press Enter.

On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 134

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 135

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Press Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Press Enter.

Page | 136

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 137

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page | 138

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 139

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 140

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 141

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Press Enter.

Page | 142

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Page | 143

User Action and Values

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

MM COURSE: MASTER
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Press Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this


material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.

Page | 144

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 145

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.

Page | 146

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page | 147

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 148

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 149

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 150

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 151

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Press Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 152

MM COURSE: MASTER
5.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 153

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZEL for Material Type


Electrical
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 154

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 155

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 156

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 157

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZEL or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 158

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 159

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 160

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 161

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 162

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 163

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 164

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 165

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 166

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 167

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 168

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 169

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 170

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Press Enter.

Page | 171

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 172

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Press Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Press Enter.

Page | 173

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 174

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Press Enter.

Page | 175

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 176

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 177

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in


the below table:

Page | 178

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Press Enter.

Page | 179

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 180

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Press Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.

Page | 181

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:
Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 182

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.

Page | 183

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Press Enter.

Page | 184

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 185

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 186

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.

Page | 187

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 188

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Press Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 189

MM COURSE: MASTER
6.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 190

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZFGN for Material Type


Finished Goods
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 191

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.

The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 192

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 193

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 194

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type Finished Goods or select
from the Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes


Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 195

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Press Enter.

Page | 196

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,


enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 197

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 198

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 199

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 200

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Enter only if different from


base UOM and required by
Vendor

Page | 201

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
If defined
here, ordering
unit will be
common for

MM COURSE: MASTER

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

all POs and


hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

Section Heading

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Page | 202

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be
different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items

MM COURSE: MASTER
Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Press Enter.

Page | 203

This field will


be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 204

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 205

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Press Enter.

Page | 206

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 207

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Enter

Page | 208

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 209

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 210

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 211

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 212

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 213

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 214

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 215

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 216

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 217

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page | 218

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 219

MM COURSE: MASTER

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 220

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

Page | 221

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 222

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 223

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 224

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 225

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 226

MM COURSE: MASTER
7.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 227

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZFGS for Material Type


Serialized Finished Goods
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


A material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 228

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 229

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 230

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type

Specifies branch of industry


to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 231

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type Serialized Finished
Goods or select from the Pull
Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 232

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 233

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 234

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 235

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 236

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 237

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 238

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 239

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 240

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 241

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 242

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 243

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 244

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Enter

Page | 245

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 246

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 247

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 248

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 249

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 250

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 251

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 252

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 253

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 254

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page | 255

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 256

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 257

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page | 258

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 259

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 260

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 261

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 262

MM COURSE: MASTER
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens
selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages)

Page | 263

MM COURSE: MASTER
8.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 264

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZIT for Material Type IT


Materials
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:\
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 265

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.

Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.

Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 266

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 267

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 268

User Action and Values


Comments
Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type IT Material or select from .
the Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 269

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 270

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 271

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 272

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 273

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Part Number to be maintained

Page | 274

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 275

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 276

This will be
same for
material type.

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 277

However it
can be
different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 278

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 279

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 280

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 281

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 282

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 283

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 284

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 285

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 286

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Page | 287

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 288

MM COURSE: MASTER
n tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 289

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 290

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 291

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

Page | 292

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 293

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 294

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page | 295

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 296

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 297

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 298

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 299

MM COURSE: MASTER
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pagee).

Page | 300

MM COURSE: MASTER
9.

MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT

Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 301

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZMKT for Material Type


Marketing Materials
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 302

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

Page | 303

MM COURSE: MASTER
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).

Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 304

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type

Specifies branch of industry


to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 305

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type Marketing Material or
select from the Pull Down
Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 306

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 307

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 308

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 309

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 310

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 311

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 312

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 313

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 314

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 315

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 316

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter.

On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 317

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 318

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 319

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 320

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 321

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 322

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 323

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Page | 324

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 325

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 326

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key
Enter.

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Page | 327

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 328

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

Page | 329

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 330

MM COURSE: MASTER

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 331

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

Page | 332

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 333

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 334

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 335

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 336

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 337

MM COURSE: MASTER
10. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 338

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZNVL for Material Type


Non Valuated
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 339

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 340

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 341

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type

Specifies branch of industry


to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Page | 342

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type Non Valuated Material or
select from the Pull Down
Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Press Enter.
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 343

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 344

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 345

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 346

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 347

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 348

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 349

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 350

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 351

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 352

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 353

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 354

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 355

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Enter

Page | 356

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 357

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.
Page | 358

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 359

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 360

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 361

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Comments

Enter.
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 362

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several

Page | 363

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

QM control
key

inspection types can be


assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this


material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

Page | 364

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 365

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 366

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 367

MM COURSE: MASTER
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 368

MM COURSE: MASTER

To extend a material to another plant:


Access transaction by:
Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 369

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 370

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 371

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 372

MM COURSE: MASTER
11. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 373

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Required as using external numbers.

Industry Sector

Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select ZRM for Material


Type Raw Material
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 374

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial

Page | 375

MM COURSE: MASTER
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 376

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 377

User Action and Values


Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System will
assign a new no for the
material
Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZADM or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 378

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 379

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 380

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, or,
O
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 381

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 382

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 383

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Enter only if different from


base UOM and required by
Vendor

Page | 384

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
If defined
here, ordering
unit will be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

Section Heading

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Page | 385

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be
different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary

MM COURSE: MASTER
Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 386

Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 387

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 388

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 389

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 390

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 391

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 392

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 393

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 394

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant Specific Old material
number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page | 395

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Page | 396

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

for workload calculation


Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 397

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

Section header

Page | 398

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

The inspection type defines


how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 399

Use pull down menu

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 400

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

Page | 401

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

Page | 402

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 403

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 404

MM COURSE: MASTER
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 405

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 406

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 407

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 408

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 409

MM COURSE: MASTER
12. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, and
MRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material
will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 410

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZSAC for Material Type


Sub Assembly Materials
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 411

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 412

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 413

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 414

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type Sub Assembly or select
from the Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 415

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 416

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 417

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 418

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 419

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 420

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 421

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 422

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 423

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 424

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 425

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 426

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 427

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 428

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 429

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 430

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 431

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 432

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Page | 433

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in


the below table:

Page | 434

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot

Page | 435

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
QM control
key

origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 436

Use pull down menu

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 437

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

Page | 438

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 439

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 440

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page | 441

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 442

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 443

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 444

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 445

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 446

MM COURSE: MASTER
13. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, and
MRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material
will need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 447

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Not required as system will assign a new number

Industry Sector

Enter T for Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 for list of choices. Select ZSOA for Material Type


Scrap of Asset
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 448

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 449

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 450

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type

Specifies branch of industry


to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 451

User Action and Values


Leave Blank System will
provide number
Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZSOA Scrap of Asset or
select from the Pull Down
Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

Page | 452

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 453

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 454

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, O
or,
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number O

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 455

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 456

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter.
Not Applicable
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 457

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 458

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 459

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 460

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter

On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 461

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 462

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 463

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 464

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant specific Old Material
Number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Numbers

Enter.

Page | 465

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Page | 466

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determination
Group

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 467

MM COURSE: MASTER
n tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 468

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Enter.

Page | 469

Use pull down menu

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 470

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Standard
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Standard price of the
material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

S Standard Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Press F4 to call the menu list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.

Not Applicable

Page | 471

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 472

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 473

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page | 474

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 475

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 476

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 477

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 478

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 479

MM COURSE: MASTER
14. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 480

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Required as using external numbers.

Industry Sector

Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select ZSOI for Material


Type Scrap of Inventory
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information

Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required

Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 481

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 482

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 483

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 484

User Action and Values


Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System will
assign a new no for the
material
Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZSOI or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 485

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 486

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 487

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, or,
O
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 488

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 489

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Not Applicable
Enter.

On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
Not Applicable
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 490

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
R

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic

Identifies the type of MRP


/MPS to be performed

Page | 491

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.
Reorder point
MRP
Controller
Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Enter.

On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below


table:

Page | 492

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

Page | 493

User Action and Values


Enter number of days if needed

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 494

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Availability
Check

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.
Page | 495

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 496

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant Specific Old material
number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page | 497

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 498

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter

Page | 499

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 500

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 501

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 502

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Mov. Avg.
Price

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price
Moving average price of
the material

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Enter price

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

Page | 503

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable

Save to create the material using the save button

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

To extend a material to add an additional department view:


Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 504

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 505

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Page | 506

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 507

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material

Group to which material is

Page | 508

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Type

assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

default in the value stored for


this material
Leave blank.

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 509

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 510

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 511

MM COURSE: MASTER
15. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS
Overview

A material master is required for a material.


A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.

Business Process Description Overview


Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control of
master data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a material
are possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measure
assigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users.
Note that to add a view, the Create Material transaction is used rather than the Change Material
transaction.

Page | 512

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input - Required Fields
Material

Field Value / Comments


Required as using external numbers.

Industry Sector

Enter T Telecom Industry

Material Type

Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select ZTCS for Material


Type Telecom & Spares
Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)

Base Unit of Measure


Other information
Output - Results
New material created
New view added to a material
Material extended to a new plant

Depending upon the views to be created, additional information


will be required
Comments
Material Created and available for other activities
View Added
Material extended

BPP Table of Contents


Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:

Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant

Page | 513

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.

To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select View selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be bypassed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select Org. levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 514

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended
to,
use
transaction
MM50
(Logistics>Material
Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
MM01

Page | 515

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Field Name
Material

Description
Key identifying material

R/O/C
N/A

Industry
Sector
Material
Type
Copy From
Material:

Specifies branch of industry


R
to which material is assigned
Group to which material is
R
assigned.
Similar material from which the O
system obtains selected values.

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 516

User Action and Values


Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System will
assign a new no for the
material
Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Type ZTCS or select from the
Pull Down Menu
Leave blank, unless new
material is based on an
existing material

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 517

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

Page | 518

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the material
master record.
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter.
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 519

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Material
Base Unit
of Measure
Material
Group
Old
Material
Number
X Plant
Matl Status

Generic
Req.
Number

Description
R/O/C
Material Description
R
Units of measure in which
R
stocks of the material are
managed
Key allowing grouping of
R
same or similar materials
Legacy system material number, or,
O
previous SAP material master number

User Action and Values


Enter in material description
Enter UOM or select from pull
down list

Indicates whether the material


may be used within different
departments

Enter if appropriate

Generic Requirement Number

Enter if Appropriate

Page | 520

Comments

Enter Material Group


Enter if appropriate

As of now this
field will not
be used.
However
depending on
requirement,
this can be
used after
implementatio
n

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Material ######## (Material Type), Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Page | 521

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Ind. Std
Desc.

Document

Description
Description
Of
The
Material in accordance
with
the
appropriate
industry standard.
Number of the drawing that
exists for this object.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Part Number to be maintained

Drawing Number to be
maintained.

On the tab Purchasing enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 522

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 523

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Base Unit
of Measure

Description
Inventory UOM

R/O/C
R

Order Unit

UOM for ordering

Purchasing
Group
Material
Group

Group Responsible for purchasing


R this
Material
Group code of like materials
R

Plant
sp.matl
status

Plant specific material status.


Determines availability of
Material for purchase or
production
Identifies the material as
managed by batch

Batch
Manageme
nt

Purchasin
g Values
Purchasing
Value Key
Other
Data
GR
Processing
time

User Action and Values


Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.

Comments
Not to be
changed or
used here
Enter only if different from
If defined
base UOM and required by
here, ordering
Vendor
unit will be
common for
all POs and
hence
recommended
to be used at
PO level and
not in
purchasing
view
Enter or select from pull down list
Defaults in from Basic Data 1 screen.
Not to be
changed or
used here
Blank indicates available
As of now this
field will not
be used.

Check if appropriate

Identifies follow up intervals


and delivery tolerances
Section Heading

Select appropriate key from


pull down list

Number of days required to


inspect and place in storage

Enter number of days if


relevant

It will be
maintained
only for those
materials for
which shelf
life needs to
be maintained.

Section Heading

Page | 524

This will be
same for
material type.
However it
can be

MM COURSE: MASTER

Source List

Mandates entry of supplier


before PO issues

Check box if appropriate

Mfr. Part
number

Manufacturer part number

Enter number if appropriate

Mfr.

Manufacturer identifier

Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 525

different for
individual
material as
well.
It will be
maintained for
Proprietary
Items
This field will
be used to
capture
manufacturer's
part no. for
proprietary
items only
This field will
be used in
case of item is
proprietary.

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Purchase order text enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL

Page | 526

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP1, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 527

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory Unit of measure

Enter the inventory unit of


measure for this product

Defaults if
Basic Data 1
view exists

MRP
Procedure
MRP Type

Section Heading
Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed

Mainly, no planning (ND) and


manual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used

After the
generation of
sufficient data
in the SAP,
later on
automatic
reorder point
planning (VM)
may be
considered.

Reorder point
MRP
Controller

Reorder point
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
Section Heading

O
O

Enter value
Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list

Identifies the type of Lot


Sizing that will occur.
Maximum stock level
allowed
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.

O
O

"Replenish to maximum stock HB" will be used.


Enter value

Enter value

Lot Size
Data
Lot Size
Maximum
stock level
Rounding
value

Enter.

Page | 528

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab MRP2, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 529

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time

Description
Number of days required to
obtain material obtained
externally

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter number of days if needed

Enter
On tab MRP3, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:

Page | 530

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 531

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Availability
Check

Description
Identifies whether total
requirements by period are
to be used or individual
Requirements
Total lead time for finished
product, including
production and
procurement along the
longest path
Indicator for cross project
material

Tot. Repl.
Lead Time

Cross project

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Enter time in days

Use pull down menu

Comments
Preference
depends upon
company

Enter.

On tab Forecasting, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:
Not Applicable

Field Name
General
data
Forecast
model

Description
Section header

R/O/C

Indicator that defines on


R
which forecast model the
system bases its calculation of
future requirements of the
material.

Enter.

Page | 532

User Action and Values

Use pull down to change


default value

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On tab Plant data/stor. 1 enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:

Page | 533

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Unit of Issue
Storage bin
Ph. Inv.
Indicator for
cycle
counting

Shelf Life
Data
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Total Shelf
Life
Period
Indicator for
shell life
Old Material
Number

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Unit in which material is


issued
Storage bin
Indicates that the given
material is subject to the
cycle counting method of
inventory. The indicator
also defines at which time
intervals a physical
inventory is to be carried
out for the material
Section Heading

O
O
O

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list
Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Enter value is appropriate
Select from pull down menu

Number of days material


needs to be kept for the
system to accept
Number of days material
will keep in total
The period indicator
specifies the unit of
measurement for a period
of time
Plant Specific Old material
number

Enter number of days.

Enter number of days

Enter number of days

Enter Old Material Number

Enter.

Page | 534

User Action and Values

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data

MM COURSE: MASTER

On tab Plant data/stor.2, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 535

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General plant
parameters
Neg. stocks
in plant
Log.
Handling
group
Serial No.
profile
Dist. Prof
Profit center
Stock
determin.
Group

Description
Section header

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Negative stocks allowed in


plant
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation

Check box as appropriate

Use pull down menu

Serial number profile

Use pull down menu

Distribution profile of
material in plant
Profit center
The stock determination
group combined with the
Stock Determination Rule
at plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.

Use pull down menu

R
O

Use pull down menu


Use pull down menu

Enter.

Page | 536

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
n tab Quality management, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:

Page | 537

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
General data
Base Unit of
measure
Procurement
data
Inspection
type

QM control
key

Description
Section header
Base unit of measure

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


defaults from Basic data View

Section header
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
origin.
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement

Use pull down menu

Enter.

On tab Accounting 1, enter information in the fields as specified in the


below table:

Page | 538

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
General
Data
Base Unit of
Measure
Valuation
Category
Current
Valuation
Valuation
Class
Prom. stk val.
Class

Price Control

Description
Section Heading

R/O/C

Inventory UOM

Indicates whether stocks


are valuated together or
separately
Section Heading

Defines which group of


G/L accounts material is
assigned
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value for
the valuation class for
valuated project stocks of
the material.
Defines whether material is
valuated with standard or
moving average price

Select from pull down menu to


change default value

Use pull down menu

V Moving Average Price

Page | 539

User Action and Values

Enter UOM or select from pull


down list

Comments

Defaults from
Basic Data.

Defaults in
from the
material type.

MM COURSE: MASTER
Mov. Avg.
Price

Moving average price of


the material

Enter price

Enter.

On tab Costing 1 and tab Costing 2, Only views will be maintained, no


field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable

On tab Plant stock , information is displayed regarding the stocks of this


material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable

On tab Stor. location stock, information is displayed regarding the stocks


of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the save button

Page | 540

or use the Ctrl S key combination.

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 541

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Press Enter.

Page | 542

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 543

MM COURSE: MASTER
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).

Page | 544

MM COURSE: MASTER
To extend a material to another plant:

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
MM01

On screen Create Material: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Page | 545

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material
Industry
Sector

Description
Key identifying material
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned

R/O/C
R
O

Material
Type

Group to which material is


assigned.

Copy From
Material:

Similar material from which the O


system
obtains selected values
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

User Action and Values


Enter material number
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this material
Leave blank.

Comments

Press Enter.

On pop up screen Select View(s), check at least one box other than the
basic data views.

Page | 546

MM COURSE: MASTER

Enter.

On pop up screen Organizational Levels, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.

Page | 547

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Profiles
MRP
Profile

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

User Action and Values

Comments

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the
Key that allows you to store
forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
Follow the procedural steps outlined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on above pages).

Page | 548

MM COURSE: MASTER
16. MM-MM02-Material-Change
Overview

A request to immediately change one or more fields in the material master views

Business Process Description Overview


Fields within the material master can be added and maintained after the initial creation process. Some
fields cannot be changed after creation (i.e. material description) and some should not be changed without
proper precautions.
To change a material master record, the data for the view the user wants to change must already be
maintained.
Note that to add a view or extend a material to a new plant, the Create Material transaction is
used rather than the Change Material transaction.

Input-Required Fields
Material

Material Number

Field Value/Comments

Output - Results
Material Master View (s) changed

Comments
Chosen view in Material Master will change

Tips and Tricks


When selecting view for change, it is possible to avoid time and effort, by clicking on right mouse
button and use Select All rather than indicating each view button
When changing material master views you can proceed in a linear fashion between views by
pressing Enter key or pressing Check mark key. By pressing the view tabs you can control
progression through views as per your preference.

Page | 549

MM COURSE: MASTER
The Views that you use will drive the Organizational level pop-up window and its fields. To set
user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:

Menus: Defaults >> Views


Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material. Select View
selection only on request when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.

Organizational levels:

Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels


Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material. Select Org.
levels/profiles only on request when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.

Page | 550

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access Change Material by:

Via Menus

(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material


master>Material>Change > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Change>Immediately
(c) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Master
Data>Products>Material >Trading Goods > Change
(d) Logistics>Logistics Execution >Master
Data>Material>Material > Change> Immediately
(e) Logistics>Customer Service> Technical Objects>
Material>Change
(f) Logistics>Quality Management Test Equipment
Management> Test Equipment > Material >Change
(g) Logistics>Project Systems> Basic data> Material
master>Material>Change

Via Transaction Code

MM02

On screen Change Material: Initial screen: enter information in table below:

Page | 551

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material

Description
Material number

R/O/C
R

Change
Number

Unique number used to


identify a change master
record

Enter.

Page | 552

User Action and Values


Enter the material number if
known or search via matchcode
Enter number if required

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
On pop up screen Select View(s), check the appropriate boxes for the
screens desired.

Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specific material types
will not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
On pop up screen Organizational Levels: enter information in table below:

Page | 553

MM COURSE: MASTER

Note: The information required will depend upon which views were selected.
Field Name
Description
Organizati Section Header
onal Levels
Plant
Plant identification key

R/O/C

Storage
Location

Storage Location
Identification key

Sales org.

Sales Organization

Distr
channel
Whse
number
Storage
type
Profiles
MRP
Profile

Distribution Channel

Warehouse number

N/A

Storage type

N/A

Section Header
MRP Parameters

Page | 554

User Action and Values

Enter Plant where material will


be active or select from pull
down menu
Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menu
Required if sales view was
selected
Required if sales view was
selected
Required if warehouse
management view selected
Required if warehouse
management view selected
Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that are
independent of the

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Forecast
prof.

Forecast profile

N/A

Key that allows you to store


forecast parameters
independently of a material
master record.

Enter.
On subsequent screens, make the necessary changes. For example Change
the Purchasing Group in Purchasing Tab

Page | 555

MM COURSE: MASTER

Save the revised material master using the


Page | 556

Save button or use Ctrl S.

MM COURSE: MASTER
17. MM-MM03-Material-Display
Overview
Need to view current material master data for one material.

Business Process Procedure Overview


A material master record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailed information without
having the authority to change it.

Input Required Fields


Material
View

Output - Results
Information about the material

Field Value/Comments
Material number
At least one view (for example, Basic Data, Sales, Accounting,
MRP, etc.) must be selected

Comments
Material displayed

Tips and Tricks

If the same values are used frequently, it will be faster to access the material master data by
setting up defaults. Default values can be set up for Industry Sector, Views and Organizational
levels. These defaults are set from the MM03 initial screen, from the menu selection
Defaults.
If all views should be displayed, it is faster to clicking on right mouse button and use Select All
(or press the Select All icon) rather than clicking on each view button.
To display a material for a specific date, please use Display Material Master by Key Date,
transaction MM19. This transaction will show the fields associated with the material on the
entered, key date.

Page | 557

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

a) Via Menus

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Material
Master>Material>Display > Display current
b) Logistics>Materials Management>Inventory
Management>Environment> information>Material
c) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Material Master >
Material > Display > Display current
d) Logistics > Plant Maintenance > Technical Objects >
Material > Display
e) Logistics > Customer Service > Technical Objects > Material
> Display
f) Logistics > Quality Management > Quality Planning >
Logistics Master Data > Material > Display
g) Logistics > Project System > Basic Data > Master Data >
Material > Display

Via Transaction Code

MM03

On screen Display Material (Initial Screen), enter information in the fields


as specified in the table below:

Page | 558

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Material

Description
Material number

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Material known or via
matchcode

Comments

On the pop-up screen Select View(s): enter information in table below:

Page | 559

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Select
View

Description
View or views that contain
the information to be
displayed

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Select the appropriate view(s)

Comments

On the pop-up screen Organizational Levels, enter the appropriate


information in table below (the system will determine which organizational
levels are appropriate for the views that have been selected):

Field Name
Plant
Storage
Location

Description
Plant number where material
is located
Location where material is
stored

R/O/C
C
C

Page | 560

User Action and Values


Plant number known or via
matchcode search
Enter storage location if known

Comments

If you are
looking for
storage location
specific
information,
then you will
be required to

MM COURSE: MASTER

Valuation
Type

How material is valued

Sales org.

The organizational unit that is


responsible for selling the
material
The way in which the
material reaches the customer

Leave blank - will default from


Materials Master

enter the
storage
location.
This field is
only used when
a material is
split valued.

Enter the appropriate sales


org., if you want to see the
Sales information
Distr.
C
Enter the appropriate
channel
Distribution channel if you
want to see the Sales
information.
Enter
Press enter or click on the
R
Will display view you have
check mark
chosen or Basic data if you
chose more than one view. It is
then possible to tab to the
specific view of current
interest.
Note: On the above table, in column R/O/C; R = required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

On the screen Display Material <material number you entered> (Material


type of the material you entered); you may do the following:

Select the tab associated with the view of information you wish to check. Scroll back and forward arrows
appear in the upper right-hand corner of the table view. Alternately, a list of views, which exist for the
material, can be seen by pressing on right most arrow. You can navigate to appropriate view via selecting
from this list.

If you wish to see the defined alternate units of measure, Material descriptions in other languages, Basic
data text, Inspection Text, or Internal Comments that exist for the material, press the Additional Data
button.

Press the button Main data to return to the views.

Page | 561

MM COURSE: MASTER

If you wish to review the changes that have been made to this material, select from the menu,
Environment > Display Changes. Double-click on the appropriate date, and you will know who changed
which fields on what date and at what time, for this material.

If you wish to check a different material, you can either press the button Other Material
arrow back to the initial screen.

Page | 562

, or green

MM COURSE: MASTER
18. MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes
Overview
Requirement to view changes made to a material master record

Business Process Procedure Overview


All changes made to fields in the material master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displays
the old field entry, the new field entry. It also shows who made the change and the date the change was
made.

Input Required Fields


Material

Material number

Output - Results
Material Master changes display

Comments
All changes made to the original Material master record

Field Value/Comments

Page | 563

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics>Materials Management>Material Master>Material>


Display Changes
MM04

On screen Display Changes: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields


as specified in the table below:

Page | 564

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name

Description

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Material

Alphanumeric key uniquely


identifying the material.

Material number known or via


matchcode search

Change no.

Number used to uniquely


identify a change master
record.
An organizational unit where
either materials are produced
and/or stored or goods or
services are provided
Uniquely identifies separately
valuated stocks of a material.
An organizational unit
responsible for the sale of
certain products or services.
The responsibility of a sales
organization may include
legal liability for products and
customer claims.
The way in which products or
services reach the customer.
Typical examples of
distribution channels are
wholesale, retail, or direct
sales.

Change number known or via


matchcode search

Plant known or via drop down


menu

Type value if known else select


via drop down menu
Type value if known else select
via drop down menu

Type value if known else select


via drop down menu

Number that identifies a


complex, physical warehouse
structure within the
Warehouse Management
system
The storage type is a
subdivision of a complex,
physical warehouse.
Name of person who changed
object

Type value if known else select


via drop down menu

Type value if known else select


via drop down menu

Type the user id to search changes


made by that user.

Date restriction for change


documents. The system only
displays changes which were
made as from this date.

Type date else select via drop


down menu

Plant

Valuation
Type
Sales Orgn.

Distributio
n Channel

Warehouse
no.

Storage
Type
Changed by

From
changed
date

Page | 565

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the

button.

On screen Display Changes: Material overview, view the field changes


made to the Material master record. Either double clicks or select and see
details via clicking Choose

button.

Page | 566

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 567

MM COURSE: MASTER
19. MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material
Overview

Need to extend existing material master records to include additional departmental views.

Business Process Procedure Overview


Material master records are an accumulation of data from numerous departments. New views of a
material are added as necessary and it is necessary to determine which views need to be added to a
material. This procedure lists all of the views that have not been created for a material.
This procedure can also be used to determine to which plants a material has been extended.

Input Required Fields


Selection limit criteria

Field Value/Comments
Necessary to prevent excessively large output lists

Output - Results
Create missing views of the material
master record

Comments
Views created as per the requirement

Tips and Tricks


To avoid excessive run times and huge output lists, it is imperative to restrict the search limits on the
initial screen. If no entries are made the system will list all materials in all plants.
By entering a material number, it is possible to determine the plants to which a material has been
extended. Additional plants need to be added using the MM01 transaction.

Page | 568

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics -> Materials management -> Material master -> Other > Extend matl view(s)
MM50

On screen Extend Material View(s): Initial Screen, enter information in the


fields as specified in the table below to limit the material search:

Page | 569

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Selection
Criteria
Maintenanc
e status

Created on
Plant

Sales
organizatio
n
Distributio
n channel
Warehouse
number
Material
Material
type
Industry
sector
Selection
logic
AND
operation

OR
operation

Description

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Section header
Identifier for the user
department responsible for
maintaining a view of the
material master record
Date that the material master
record was created
Organizational unit
responsible for the producing
materials or providing goods
or services
Organizational unit
responsible for the sales of
specific products or services
Identifier for the method in
which a product reaches
customers.
Number of the warehouse

Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Number of the material


Code that assigns a material
to a group of materials
Identifier for the industry that
the material is assigned
Section header

O
O

Use pull down menu to select.


Use pull down menu to select.

Use pull down menu to select.

Flag that indicates if the


system should select views
that satisfy all of the selection
parameters
Flag that indicates if the
system should select views
that satisfy one of the
selection parameters

Select AND or OR

Execute the selection process by clicking on the Execute


Page | 570

button.

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER

On screen Extend Material View(s): Overview, select from the list of views
to be processed for each material by selecting the boxes in the left column.

Select from the following buttons to process the material master record
views:
Maintain materials [Shift+F1]: Allows the user to maintain the selected views
Page | 571

MM COURSE: MASTER
Delete status [Shift+F2]: Allows the user to delete the selected open status(es)
Select all [Shift+F8]: Selects all of the material views listed
Select all in block [Shift+F7]: Selects the current block of material views
Deselect all [Shift+F5}: Deselects all selected material views
Deselect block [Shift+F6]: Deselects the current block of selected material views
Reference/organization [F9]: Allows the user to create material views with
reference to existing material master records

Once the required material views have been selected, click on the Maintain
materials button to go to the corresponding view(s) in the material
master(s).

Page | 572

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter the information necessary to complete the view and save each
material after processing.

Repeat as necessary for additional materials.

Page | 573

MM COURSE: MASTER

2. Service Master
1.

MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display

Overview
A service master record provides a unique description of services that are procured by BSNL.

Business Process Description Overview


This document describes the procedure for creating service master records via list processing. This
process enables the user to quickly create a large number of service master records with their most
important data in the system, referencing any already existing master records if desired. A service is
identified by the number of this master record. The service master record serves as a source of default
data provided by the system during the creation of service specifications.

Input Required Fields


Service Category
Service short text
Base Unit of Measure

Output - Results
Service Master Record Number

Field Value/Comments
Key used to differentiate services by usage
Description which identifies service
Services have base units of measure of their own: service unit and
blanket
Comments
Internal number range

Page | 574

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks

To create a new service master record, click on the create icon (blank pc. of paper).

To edit an existing service master record, click on the change icon (pencil with eye glasses)

To copy an existing master record, click on the copy as icon (two yellow pcs. of paper)

To show/ hide service list overview, click

To display other service codes (already created) select, other services button and enter
the service code you want to display:

icon

Page | 575

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

a) Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing>


Material/service> Service> Service Master

b) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing>


Outline Agreement> Reporting> Purchasing Information
System> Environment> Master data> Service
c) Logistics> Customer Service>Service
Agreements>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>Service
Master> Service> Service Master
d) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>
Environment> Service Master> Service> Service Master
e) Logistics> Plant Maintenance>Planned
Maintenance>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>Service
Master>Service> Service Master
f) Logistics>Materials Management>Service
Master>Service>Service Master
Via Transaction Code

AC03

On screen Display Service #############, click the New Service button or


use the menu path EDIT >NEW to access the Create Service Master Record
Screen:

Page | 576

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 577

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen Create Service Master Record, enter the information in the
fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name

Description

R/O/
C
R

User Action and Values

Activity
Number
Service
Short Text
Service
Category

Key which uniquely defines a


service
40 char. Enter description of
service
Key identifying service by
usage

Enter a short description of service

Enter service category

Short tx.
Change
allowed
Base Unit
of Measure

Check indicates that changes


to text are allowed

Service Unit or Blanket

Deletion
Flag

Indicator that allows deletion of theO


master record

External numbering will be used.

Page | 578

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Formula

Formula used for quantities if


defined

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

Click on Basic Data button to enter basic data information in the fields as
specified in the table below:

Field Name
Material
Group
Formula

Description
Key to group several services
with the same attributes

Formula used for quantities if


Defined
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

R/O/C
User Action and Values
O
If all new records the user are
creating have the same material
group, enter value here.
O

Comments

Press button Time mgmt. Enter the information in the fields as listed in the
table below.

Page | 579

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Hier.
Service
No.

Description
A code identifying a group of
lower level services

R/O/C
User Action and Values
O
Enter the code

Comments
Not
Applicable

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition

Press button Internal Work. Enter the information in the fields as listed in
the table below.

Field Name
Translatio
n

Description
Factor for translating service
rates

R/O/C
User Action and Values
O
Enter the conversion rate

Comments
Not
Applicable

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition

Save the master record by clicking on the yellow floppy disk icon, or crtl+S

1.2.1. Message will be displayed confirming that the data records have been created

Exit Create Service Master processing. Click on yellow up-facing arrow icon,
or Shift+F3

Page | 580

MM COURSE: MASTER
2.0.

2.

Use the same transaction code to change or display the service master record.

MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display

Overview
Requirement for information and the status of service master records

Business Process Description Overview


This document describes the procedure for displaying service master records via list processing

Input Required Fields


Service Number
Service Category

Field Value/Comments
Can be found using possible entries facility to choose relevant
master record
Can be found using possible entries facility to choose relevant
master record

Output - Results
List Display of Service Master
Records

Comments

Page | 581

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Service
Master>Service>Service List
b) Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Maintenance Processing>
Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List

c) Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Planned Maintenance>


Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>
Service> Service List

d) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Agreements>


Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>
Service> Service List

e) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>


Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List

f)

Via Transaction Code

Information Systems> General Report Selection> Materials


Management> Service Master> List Display: Service Master

AC06

Page | 582

MM COURSE: MASTER
On screen List Display: Service Master: Selection of Services: enter the user
desired selection criteria by choosing fields below:

Field Name

Description

R/O/
C
O

Activity
Number

Key that uniquely defines a


service

Service
Category

Key used to differentiate


services by usage

Service

Description of service

User Action and Values

Comments

Activity number known or via


matchcode selection to narrow
search

Leaving
blank will
return all
records
with
criteria

Service category known or via


matchcode selection to narrow
search
Enter description to narrow records

Page | 583

MM COURSE: MASTER
short text
Material
Group

Key to group several services


with the same attributes

Division

Determines sales area and businessO


areas

Hier.
Service no.
Service
Type
Edition
SSC Item

Key that identifies a higher-level O


service
Service Type
O

Wage Type
Authorizati
on Group
Created On
Created By
Changed
On
Changed
By

Version of service type


O
External number assigned to this O
service from standard service catalog
Key which specifies wage type O

Material group known or via matchcode


selection to narrow search
Division known or via matchcode selection
to
narrow search
Enter higher-level service to narrow search
Enter service type to narrow search
Enter Edition to narrow records
Enter SSC item to narrow search

Group which authorizes users to


certain access
Date created
User
Date changed

Enter wage type or via matchcode selection


to narrow search
Enter authorization group to narrow search

O
O
O

Select date
Select user
Select date

User

Select user
Once selections are made, choose the
execute button (PROGRAM>EXECUTE)
to retrieve list of services which met
service selection criteria

R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional

On screen List Display: Service Master: List of Services: a list of services


which
met selection criteria from step 1.2 are shown:

Page | 584

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 585

MM COURSE: MASTER
Double click on service numbers the user want to individually display

Page | 586

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click Details

Selected Service is displayed

Page | 587

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 588

MM COURSE: MASTER
3.

MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create

Overview
The need for service specifications that can be used in purchasing documents for planned
procurements activities that include services.

Business Process Description Overview


This document describes the procedure for creating a model service specification. Model service
specifications (model specs) are specifications that can be used time and time again. You can use the
specifications for a certain group of services as a template if you procure these services repeatedly in the
future

Input Required Fields


Model Service Specification
Name/Number

Field Value/Comments
Enter a Model Service Specification name or number

Output - Results
Completed Model Service
Specification

Comments
Can be used as template for repeated use

Page | 589

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model


Service Specification>Create
ML10

On screen Create Model Services Specifications, enter the information in


the fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 590

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Model
Service
Specs.
Service
Category

Description
Number of a set of model
service specifications
Key used to
differentiate between
services according to
their usage. The
service category
defines certain
attributes of the service
and has a control
function.

R/O/
C
R

User Action and Values


Enter a key (name or number for
example) for the new service
model.
Enter the appropriate service
category for the new model.

Comments

Matchcode
(F4) search
help
available.

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter

button.

On screen Create Model Services Specifications, enter the information in


the fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 591

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
Blocking
indicator
Configurati
on/Service
selection
Description

Description
Indicator: blocks the use of
the specification.
Indicator: configuration
occurs at the time of service
selection.
Enter description of model
service spec

R/O/
C
O

User Action and Values


Select if desired. Default is off.

Select if desired. Default is off.

Enter description.

Page | 592

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Search term
Currency
Material
Group
Default
data for
Purchasing
Requisition
Check Data

Search key
Currency Key
Key which groups similar
services
Purchasing Org
Fixed vendor
Contract

O
O
O

Enter search term


Enter currency
Please refer the attached annexure

Enter default data

Enter check data

Authorization Group
Purchasing Status
Valid from
Created On
Created By
Changed On
Changed By

Display only, created by the system The I icon


at the time of creation and
will call up
subsequent changes to the spec.
the detailed
information
pop-up.
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Administrat
ive data

Page | 593

MM COURSE: MASTER

Once all appropriate entries have been made, click on the Services button to
maintain the service specifications.

Page | 594

MM COURSE: MASTER

If Hierarchy needs to be maintained, Click on New Sub Group button. Here,


hierarchy up to 4 levels can be maintained. Create the levels as follows;

Page | 595

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Outline
level
Short text
Long Text

Description
Key for the outline
(hierarchy) level.
Short description of the
service (activity or work).
Long description of the
service (activity or work).

R/O/C
User Action and Values
R
Give a number as per which
hierarchy will be maintained.
R
O

Comments

Short description of respective


Hierarchy level
Long description of respective
Hierarchy level

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

In Service Specification Outline, double click on the respective level at which


the service information needs to be maintained. It will take you to
screenModel Service Specifications Maintain for that level. Under the
respective level enter the information in the fields as specified in the table
below:

Page | 596

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name
Service
No

Short Text

Quantity
U

Description
R/O/C
User Action and Values
Service Number from Service
O
Enter Service Number for codified
Master Record
services.

Description of Service

Quantity of Service
Unit

R
R

Dont give service no. if the


service to be maintained here is
uncodified.
For codified services, will default
from Service Master record for
Service Number entered.
If a particular service is a one-time
service and no service master
record in maintained, then a free
text description should be entered
here.
Enter Quantity for service.
Enter unit of measure.

Comments
Matchcode
(F4) search
help is
available.

Matchcode
(F4) search
help is
available.

This will default from the Service


master record if a Service Number
is entered.
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Once all the entries have been made, save the Model Service Specification
by clicking on the Save button

The system will display a message Model Specification XXXXXXX saved,


with XXXXXXXX = to the name or number entered on the initial creation
screen.

Page | 597

MM COURSE: MASTER
4.

MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change

Overview
Need to change current Model Service Specification.

Business Process Procedure Overview


Fields within the Model Service Specification record can be added and maintained after the initial
creation process.

Input Required Fields


Model Service Specification

Field Value/Comments
Model Service Specification number

Output - Results
Information changed as per
requirement about the Model Service
Specification

Comments
Model Service Specification changed

Page | 598

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

b) Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

h) Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model


Service Specification>Change
ML11

On screen Display Model Service specification, enter information in the


fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name
Description
R/O/C
User Action and Values
Comments
Model
Number of a set of model
R
Model Service Specification
Service
service specifications
known or via matchcode
Specs.
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 599

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter
It will take to Change Model Service Specification screen. Information about Service category, Blocking
indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default
data for Purchasing Requisition and Check Data can be changed. Please note, Administrative data can not
be changed as it is maintained by system.

Page | 600

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click Services button. It will take to Model Service Specification display screen.

Outline On/Off

To see the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, In header, go to Outline.
Click Outline On/ Off

It will show service specs outline.

Page | 601

MM COURSE: MASTER

Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective
hierarchy level and make changes accordingly.

Page | 602

MM COURSE: MASTER
5.

MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display

Overview
Need to view current Model Service Specification.

Business Process Procedure Overview


A Model Service Specification record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailed
information without having the authority to change it.

Input Required Fields


Model Service Specification

Field Value/Comments
Model Service Specification number

Output - Results
Information about the Model Service
Specification

Comments
Model Service Specification displayed

Page | 603

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:


c) Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

i)

Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model


Service Specification>Display
ML12

On screen Display Model Service specification, enter information in the


fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name
Description
R/O/C
User Action and Values
Comments
Model
Number of a set of model
R
Model Service Specification
Service
service specifications
known or via matchcode
Specs.
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Enter

Page | 604

MM COURSE: MASTER
It will take to Display Model Service Specification screen. Information about Service category, Blocking
indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default
data for Purchasing Requisition, Check Data and Administrative data will be displayed.

Page | 605

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click Services button. It will take to Model Service Specification display screen.

To display the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, in header, go to
Outline. Click Outline On/ Off
It will display service specs outline.

Page | 606

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective
hierarchy level.

Page | 607

MM COURSE: MASTER

3. Vendor Master
1.

MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally)

Overview
A new vendor needs to be created.
Business Process Description Overview
All vendor data is stored in the vendor master record and controls how transaction data is posted to a
vendor.

Vendor master data is used not only by the accounting department but also by the materials
management department. When setting up the master records, there is the option to create the
accounting and materials management sections separately, each in its own application area, or together
by creating the vendor master centrally.

A vendor master record includes data such as:

vendor name, address, language, and phone numbers

tax numbers

bank data

account control data, such as the G/L reconciliation account for the vendor account

payment methods and terms of payment as agreed with the vendor

purchasing data

Page | 608

MM COURSE: MASTER
Input Required Fields
Vendor
Company Code
Purchasing Organization
Account Group
Reference Vendor

Comments
Name of vendor
Company code in which the vendor is being set up
Purchasing organization that the vendor is associated with
Account Group of vendor
An existing vendor that the new vendor can be copied from

Output - Results
All vendor information for New
Vendor

Comments

Tips and Tricks


This process describes creating the vendor master centrally (accounting views and the purchasing
views of the vendor master record). To create just the purchasing views, see the BPP for transaction
MK01.
By creating/storing vendor master records centrally, permits common access and allows the entering
of data only once and to avoid contradictory/redundant data. If a vendor's address has changed, for
example, the user needs to enter the change only once, and both the accounting department and the
purchasing department will have access to the most current data.

Page | 609

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >
Vendor
> Central > Create
XK01

Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

On screen Create Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the below table:

Field Name

Description

Vendor

If using external number assignment,


enter the vendor's account number.
If using internal number assignment,
the system assigns a number when
saving the master data.

Company
code

the company code ID

R/O/
C
O

Page | 610

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
A classifying feature within the
vendor master record which
determines if the vendor account
number will be assigned internally or
externally and which fields are
proposed for input

Enter account classifying


number

Vendor

The vendors account number that is


being used as a reference as an
alternative way in which to create a
vendor account

Note: Vendor specific data


of the referenced vendor
such as address is not
carried over. The data
from the referenced
vendor is used for default
values and it is suggested
that all screens be
reviewed before saving
any data

Company
Code

The company code assigned with the


reference vendor

Purchasin
g
Organizati
on

The purchasing associated with the


referenced vendor

Account
group

Referenc
e

Please refer the attached


annexure

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 611

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Enter button.
On screen Create Vendor: Address Screen, enter information in the fields
as specified in the table below:

Field
Name

Description

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Name

Vendor or company name

Enter selected vendor name

Search
term

Short name which is used


to set up a matchcode

Enter search term such as


abbreviated address or
initials

Page | 612

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Street

street address

City

city

Postal
code or
PO box
PCode

zip code

Country

two digit country identifier

Region
(state)

two letter state


abbreviation

Language

one letter language code

Telephone

Telephone number

Fax

Fax number

Standard
comm line

Other line for


communication

Comment
s

Use this block for optional


comments or notes

Other communication types


can also be maintained

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 613

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Enter button.
On screen Create Vendor: Control, enter information in the optional fields
as applicable in the table below:

Field
Name

Description

R/O/
C

Customer

If the vendor is also a customer, use


this field to link the two records
together for line item display and
transaction processing

Group Key

If the vendor belongs to a group, can


assign a group key here. If creating a
matchcode using this group key, group
evaluations are possible.

Industry
key

Assigned industry key used to identify


industry data

Page | 614

User Action and


Values

Enter as required

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Payment Transactions, enter the vendors
banking information if applicable (e.g. for wire transfers):

Field
Name

Description

R/O/
C

Country

Bank country key

Bank Key

Key under which bank data in the


respective country is stored

Account
Holder

Another name that the payment


program can use if the name of the
account holder is not the same as the
name of the vendor

Page | 615

User Action and


Values

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER
Bank
Account

The number at the bank under which


the account is managed

Alternative
Payee

The vendors account number

This field is used only


if the payment is to
be made directly to
the vendor and not to
the vendors bank

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table:

Field Name

Description

Reconcilia
tion
account

account which is updated parallel to


the sub-ledger account for normal
postings

Sort key

This field determines how the


allocation field is populated during
document entry. When displaying
line items, the line items are sorted
initially by the allocation field.

Page | 616

R/O/
C
R

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Minority
Indicator

Minority Indicator

Interest
Indicator

Interest Indicator

Interest
Frequency

Interest Frequency

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting, enter
information in the optional fields as applicable:

Page | 617

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field
Name

Description

R/O/
C
O

Payment
Terms

Key for defining payment terms


composed of cash discount
percentages and payment periods

Toleranc
e group

Settings for vendor-specific


parameters in Logistics Invoice
Verification.

Check
Double
Invoice

Indicator which means that incoming


invoices and credit memos are
checked for double entries at the time
of entry.

Payment
Methods

different methods by which the vendor


can be paid using the automatic
payment program

Payment
Block

Block key used to block an open item


or an account for payment
transactions.

Alternate
Payee

The account number of the vendor


with whom automatic payment
transactions are to be carried out.

House
Bank

The key for the house bank is used if


the customer/vendor is always to be
paid by the same house bank. The
bank selection of the payment
program is cancelled with this entry.

Payment
Method
Supplime
nt

Characteristic in an open item for the


grouping of payments.

User Action and Values

Comments

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting: enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below.
Leave this screen blank

Page | 618

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Enter button.
On screen Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:, enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below.
With-holding tax box not checked

Field
Name
Withholdi
ng Tax
Country
Indicator
for
withholdin
g tax type
Withholdi
ng tax
code
Liable to
withholdin
g tax

Description
In some countries, an additional country
is needed for calculating or reporting
withholding tax. The calculation can
depend on the payee's country
This indicator is used to classify the
different types of withholding tax.

One or more "withholding tax codes" are


assigned to each withholding tax type.

R/O/
C
O

If you set this indicator, you tell the


system that the vendor is subject to
withholding tax for this withholding tax
type.
Type of
It is used to group vendors together
recipient
according to particular characteristics
such as occupations that may be subject to
the same withholding tax type
It is used to group vendors together
Withholding tax
identificationaccording to particular characteristics
such as occupations that may be subject to
number
the same withholding tax type

Exemption Numbered assigned by the relevant


authorities for exemption from
certificate number
withholding tax.

Rate of exemption from withholding tax.


Exemption rate

Page | 619

User Action and Values

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
Reason for
exemption

Indicator used to classify different types


of exemption from liability to a particular
withholding tax.

Date on
which
exemption
begins

Date from which withholding tax

Date on
which
exemption
ends

Date up to which withholding tax

exemption applies.

exemption applies.

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Purchasing Data, Enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:

Page | 620

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field
Name

Description

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Order
Currency

Order Currency

Enter Currency Code for


transactions with this vendor

Incoterms

Incoterms

Select code and enter value


in second box (FOB - city)

Schema
group,
vendor

Schema group, vendor

Enter Schema code

GR-based
inv. Verif

Goods receipt based


invoice
Verification flag

Click on if applicable

Page | 621

Comments

MM COURSE: MASTER
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Create Vendor: Partner Functions, enter information in the
fields as specified in the below table:
Leave this screen blank

Page | 622

MM COURSE: MASTER
When all information has been entered, the system will prompt the user to
save the information. Select the Yes option. Click on the Enter button.

The system will create and post vendor number in the message box at
bottom of screen.

Page | 623

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 624

MM COURSE: MASTER
2.

MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally)

Overview
Requirement to change vendor material master document

Business Process Description Overview


Vendor master data is the data required conducting business relationships with your vendors. It includes
address data and terms of payment, for example. It also controls how business transactions are posted to
a vendor account and how the posted data is processed.

Input - Required Fields


Vendor
Company code
Processing Options

Field Value / Comments

Select at least one screen from among the general data (address,
control, payment transactions) or company code screens
(accounting info., payment transactions, correspondence,
withholding tax)

Output - Results

Comments

Tips and Tricks

Use the mouse right click on any field and it a drop down display will appear with one of the
selections to take advantage of is possible entries. By using this function you can get information
on the types of data requirement for each field.

Page | 625

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:


Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >
Vendor > Central > Change
XK02

On screen Change Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the table below

Field Name
Vendor

Description
enter the vendors account
number
the company code ID of the
vendor
Purchase Organization

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values

Comments

Company
R
code
Purch.
R
Organizatio
n
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 626

MM COURSE: MASTER
Select the appropriate combination of general data or company code data or
purchasing organization data processing options for screens to change.
NOTE:
The menu path Edit Select all selects all the field groups listed
under General Data, Company Code Data and Purchasing Organization Data.
Click on the Enter button.
Use the left (F7) or right (F8) arrow buttons at the top left of the screen to
navigate between the different general and company code data screens.
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Address screen. Click
on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Page | 627

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 628

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Control Data screen.
Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Page | 629

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Payment Transactions
screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Accounting Info.


screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Page | 630

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Payment Transactions
screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Page | 631

MM COURSE: MASTER
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Withholding Tax
screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
Enter the necessary changes on the Change Vendor: Purchasing Data
screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.

Page | 632

MM COURSE: MASTER
To save the changes that were made to the master record, use menu path
Vendor Save.

Page | 633

MM COURSE: MASTER
3.

MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally)

Overview
To view the information related to vendor. You can display vendor using vendor number or using
drop down box select from vendor list.

Business Process Procedure Overview


The display vendor (centrally) transaction allows the user to view the entire vendor master record. This
view includes general, company code, and purchasing data.

Input Required Fields


Vendor
Company Code

Purchasing Organization

Output Results
Vendor displays

Field Value/Comments
Vendor number
The smallest organizational unit for which a complete selfcontained set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of
external reporting
Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of
purchase for one or more plants

Comments
A vendors general data, company code data, and purchasing data
are accessible

Page | 634

MM COURSE: MASTER
Tips and Tricks
On the Display vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box
that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search,
back up or go forward or exit the screen.
After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to
advance to the next screen(s)
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
Data>Vendor>Central> Display
XK03

On screen Display Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the table below:

Page | 635

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name

Description

R/O/C

Vendor

Vendor number

Company
code

The smallest organizational


unit for which a complete
self-contained set of
accounts can be drawn up
for purposes of external
reporting
Organizational unit that
negotiates the general
conditions of purchase for
one or more plants
Vendor address screen
Control data screen
Banking information

Purchasing
organization

Address
Control
Payment
transactions
Accounting
info
Payment
transactions

User Action and Values


Vendor number known or via
matchcode search
Company code known or via
matchcode search
search

Purchasing organization known or


via matchcode search

O
O
O

Select if applicable
Select if applicable
Select if applicable

Accounting information

Select if applicable

Payment information

Select if applicable

Page | 636

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER
Corresponden Dunning and vendor
O
Select if applicable
ce
contact information
Withholding
C
Will see tax withholding in message field
tax
on bottom of screen
Purchasing
Purchasing information
O
Select if applicable
data
Partner
Vendor partner structure
O
Select if applicable
functions
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button. The following views are available to gather
information from.
Display Vendor: Address

Page | 637

MM COURSE: MASTER
Display Vendor: Control

Display Vendor: Payment Transactions

Page | 638

MM COURSE: MASTER
Display Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting

Display Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting

Display Vendor: Correspondence Accounting


Not activated

Page | 639

MM COURSE: MASTER
Display Vendor: Withholding Tax data
Not activated

Display Vendor: Purchasing Data

Display Vendor: Partner Functions

Page | 640

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 641

MM COURSE: MASTER
4.

MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally)

Overview
Requirement to view changes made to a vendor master record

Business Process Procedure Overview


All changes made to fields in the vendor master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displays
the old field entry; the new field entry, as well as the table and field name. It also shows who made the
change and the date the change was made. Other information available includes deletions made to the
master record.

Input Required Fields


Vendor

Vendor number

Output - Results
Vendor account changes display

Comments
All changes made to the original vendor master record

Field Value/Comments

Tips and Tricks

If you select a field and with a right click on the mouse button you will see a drop down box appear
and one of the selections you can see choose suggest entries for each field on a document.

Page | 642

MM COURSE: MASTER
After each section click on the Enter button to advance to the next screen.

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
Data>Vendor>Central> Changes
XK04

On screen Vendor Account Changes: Initial Screen, enter information in


the fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 643

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name

Description

R/O/C

Vendor

Vendor number

Company
code

The smallest organizational


unit for which a complete
self-contained set of accounts
can be drawn up for purposes
of external reporting

Page | 644

User Action and Values


Vendor number known or via
matchcode
search
Company code known or via drop
down menu

Comment
s

MM COURSE: MASTER
Dunning
area

Represents an organizational
O
Dunning area known or via drop
entity that is responsible for
down menu
dunning. The dunning areas
represent a sub-structure of
the company codes
Purch.
Organizational unit that
O
Purchasing organization known or
organizatio negotiates the general
via drop down menu
n
conditions of purchase for
one or more plants
Vendor
Sub-division of a vendors
O
Vendor sub-range known or via
sub-range
total product range according
drop down menu
to various criteria
Plant
An organizational unit where O
Plant known or via drop down
either materials are produced
menu
and/or stored or goods or
services are provided
Period of
O
Enter date
From change date
change
Enter Time
Time
Enter User
Changed by
Field
O
Display only sensitive fields.
Sensitive fields. Only
Selection
Display only company code
Comp. Code-specific
specific fields.
fields only
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Enter button.


On screen Vendor Changes: Changed Fields, view the field changes made
to the vendor master record:

Overview: Overview displays changed fields in the vendor master record.


If the user enters the purchasing organization and/or the company code on
Page | 645

MM COURSE: MASTER
the initial screen, all purchasing and company code changes are visible. If
not, only the general data changes can be viewed.

Click on the All Changes button to view additional change information.

On screen Vendor Changes: Overview, view the detailed field change


information:
All Changes: The All Changed view displays the changed field, when it was
changed, as well as the old and new value for the field.

Page | 646

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Entries button to view additional change information.
On screen Vendor Changes: Entries, view the detailed entry change
information:
Entries:
The Entries view displays the general views of the vendor
master. By double clicking on a view, the date and user who made the
change is visible.
Click on the Deletions button to view additional change information.

On screen Vendor Changes: Deletions, view the detailed entry change


information:
Deletions: The Deletions view displays all deleted information from a
vendor master record such as bank details or partner function.
Not Available in this case

Page | 647

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Field Names button to view additional change information.
On screen Vendor Changes: Changed Fields, view the detailed entry
change information:
Field Names:
The Field Names view displays the table, field name, and
field description for a particular piece of changed data.

Page | 648

MM COURSE: MASTER
5.

MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally)

Overview
To block a vendor from posting and order processing.

Business Process Procedure Overview


You can block a vendor from posting, from order processing or from both. Blocking (and unblocking)
can be set in either Financial Accounting or Materials Management. Within Accounts Payable, you can
block a vendor account from posting. (See BPP Block Vendor (Accounting)). You have to block a
vendor master record before you can mark it for deletion. You would also block a vendor that you use
only as an alternative payment recipient, so that nobody can post to it by mistake. Only block an account
if there are no more open items in the account. If an account is blocked, you cannot clear any open items.
Within Purchasing, you can block a vendor from order processing. (See BPP Block Vendor
(Purchasing)).
You can block a vendor from both posting and order processing simultaneously from either Accounts
Payable or Purchasing (See BPP Block Vendor (Centrally)).
You can cancel a vendor account block at any time. To do this, simply remove the relevant
indicator.

Input Required Fields


Vendor
Company Code
Purchasing Organization

Field Value/Comments

Output - Results
Vendor is blocked from posting or
order processing.

Comments

Page | 649

MM COURSE: MASTER

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus

Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable


Master Records Maintain Centrally Block/Unblock
Logistics Materials Management Master Data Vendor
Central Block/Unblock

Via Transaction Code

XK05

On screen Block / Unblock Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the


fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 650

MM COURSE: MASTER
Field Name

Description

R/O/C

Vendor

Vendor number

Company
Code

Company Code

Purchasing
Organizatio
n

Purchasing Organization
identifier

User Action and Values

Comment
s
Use drop
down menu
Use drop
down menu

Enter the Vendor number to be


blocked.
If you enter a value in this field,
the next screen will allow you to
block entries for this company
code or all company codes.
However, if you leave this field
blank, you will only be able block
ALL company codes.
Please refer the attached annexure. Use drop
down menu

(Note: On Above table in column R/O/C, R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the

to continue.

On screen Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen, enter information in


the fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 651

MM COURSE: MASTER

Field Name
All
Company
codes

Description

R/O/C

Indicator specifying whether


posting is allowed for this
vendor master record for all
company codes.
Indicates the vendor is
blocked for posting in the
specified company code.

All
Purchasing
Organizatio
n

Indicator specifying whether


purchasing order processing
is blocked for this vendor
master record for all
purchasing organizations.

Block for
quality
reasons

Reasons for blocking this


vendor master record from
purchasing order processing.

Selected
Co. Code

User Action and Values

Comment
s

Check the box if the vendor


masters record is to be blocked
from posting for all company
codes.
Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be blocked
from posting for only specified
company code.
Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be blocked
from order processing for all
purchasing organizations.

Use the drop down menu for


predefined reasons.

(Note: On Above table in column R/O/C, R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 652

MM COURSE: MASTER
Click on the Save Icon to save all the changes

NOTE: A vendor account block may be cancelled at any time. To do this, simply remove the
relevant indicator/checks then click Save to save the changes

Page | 653

MM COURSE: MASTER
6.

MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion

Overview
Archiving and Deleting Vendor Master Records

Business Process Procedure Overview


You can archive vendor account master records that you no longer need. Archiving data entails it being
extracted from the SAP database, deleted and placed in a file. You can then transfer this file to an archive
system.

Vendor master records may not be archived immediately. For you to archive a vendor master
record, the following requirements must be met:
The account cannot contain any transaction figures in the system. Transaction figures from prior
years that have not been archived will prevent the system from deleting the account master
record.
The account must be marked for deletion in its master record.
You should block an account for posting before you mark it for deletion. The only effect this deletion
indicator has is to cause a warning to be issued every time you subsequently try to post to this account.

Input Required Fields


Vendor
Company Code
Purchasing Organization

Field Value/Comments

Output - Results
Vendor is flagged for deletion

Comments

Page | 654

MM COURSE: MASTER
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:


Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable
Master Records Maintain Centrally Mark for deletion

Via Menus

Logistics Materials Management Master Data Vendor


Central Mark for deletion
XK06

Via Transaction Code

On screen Flag for deletion Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below:

Field Name

Description

R/O/C

Vendor

Vendor number

Company
Code

Company Code

Page | 655

User Action and Values


Enter the Vendor number to be
flagged for deletion.
If you enter a value in this field,
the next screen will allow you to
tick deletion flag and deletion
block for this company code or all
company codes. However, if you

Comment
s
Use drop
down menu
Use drop
down menu

MM COURSE: MASTER

Purchasing
Organizatio
n

Purchasing Organization

leave this field blank, you will


only be able to tick deletion flag
and deletion block for ALL
company codes.
Please refer the attached annexure

Use drop
down menu

(Note: On Above table in column R/O/C, R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the

to continue.

On screen Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen, enter information in


the fields as specified in the table below:

Page | 656

MM COURSE: MASTER

Page | 657

MM COURSE 1

Field
Name
Deletion
Flag
All areas

Description

R/O/C

Indicates that all data in this


master record is to be deleted.

Selected
Co. Code

Indicates that the company


code data in this master
record is to be deleted.

All
Purchasing
Organizatio
n

Indicates whether or not

Deletion
Block
General
Data

Selected
co. code
including
general
data

User Action and Values

Commen
ts

Check the box if the vendor


master record is to be flagged for
deletion for all company codes.
Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be flagged for
deletion for only specified
company code.
Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be flagged for
deletion for all purchasing
organizations.

the vendor master record


is earmarked for deletion.

This indicator specifies that


the general data in the master
record may not be deleted.

Check the box if general data in


vendor master record is not to be
deleted.

This indicator specifies that


the company code-specific
data in the master record may
not be deleted.

Check the box if company codespecific data in the master record


is not to be deleted.

(Note: On Above table in column R/O/C, R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Save Icon to save all the changes.

Page | 658

MM COURSE 1
7.

MM-MKVZ-List Display

Overview
Requirement to view information of a vendor maintained for purchasing. You can display vendor using
vendor number or using drop down box select from vendor list.

Business Process Procedure Overview


The Purchasing List transaction allows the user to view the vendor master record maintained for
purchasing. This view includes purchasing data.

Input Required Fields


Vendor

Field Value/Comments
Vendor number

Purchasing Organization

Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of


purchase for one or more plants

Account Group

The account group is a classifying feature within vendor master


records

Output - Results
Vendor displays

Comments
A vendors purchasing data are accessible

Page | 659

MM COURSE 1
Tips and Tricks

On the List of vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box
that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search, back
up or go forward or exit the screen.

After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to
advance to the next screen(s)

Page | 660

MM COURSE 1
Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
Data>Vendor>List Displays>
MKVZ

On screen Display Vendor: Initial Screen, enter information in the fields as


specified in the table below:

Page | 661

MM COURSE 1
Field Name
Vendor

Description
Vendor number

Purchasing
organization

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Vendor number known or via
matchcode search
Please refer the attached annexure

Organizational unit that


O
negotiates the general
conditions of purchase for
one or more plants
Account
The account group is a
O
Select if applicable
Group
classifying feature within
vendor master records
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Click on the Execute button.

Page | 662

Comment
s

MM COURSE 1
8.

MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance

Overview
Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as
different class vendors have different tender limits.

Prerequisite:
1. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level
2. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01

Business Process:
1. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level
2. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01

Activity
Maintain Class & Value Limit relationship
that be utilized for further classification for
vendors

T Code
ZMMP_VCL01

Remarks
Maintain the Class & Value
Relationship, Enter Class, Class
Description, Value Limit &
Currency
Click on
to maintain
more values & class relationship

Procedural Steps:

1.
In the screen Change View Vendor Classification :Overview enter values in the following fields:
Field Name
Description
R/O/C
User Action and Values
Comments
Vendor
Name a new vendor class
C
Enter the serial number.
class
Text 30
Give short name to the class.
C
Write short description.
characters
Value limit Amount defined for that vendor
C
Enter amount applicable for
for vendors class
that class.
Reference
Enter unit
C
Enter unit.
for
currency

Page | 663

MM COURSE 1
After entering the selection parameter Press Save button

1.1. Change View Vendor Classification :Overview Screen:


Fill in the required fields and click Save button

Page | 664

MM COURSE 1
9.

MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance

Overview
Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as
different class vendors have different tender limits.

Prerequisite:

3. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level


4. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VC01.

Business Process:

1. Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor


masters related to Civil as different class vendors have different tender limits

Activity
Classifying the vendor & assigning the
relevant class applicable for the vendor

T Code
ZMMP_VC01

Remarks
Enter Company code & Plant to
display existing entries
Click on Change button to change
the class
Click on
to maintain
Enter vendor code, company code,
plant & chose relevant class
applicable for vendor

Page | 665

MM COURSE 1

Procedural Steps
Description
Field Name
Account
number of
vendor
Company
code

R/O/C

User Action and Values

Takes the vendor number.

Enter the vendor number

Takes the company code.

Write the company code for


the vendor.

Comments

1.1. Vendor Classification Maintenance screen:

Enter company code and plant in the required fields.

Press Execute button

1.2. Screen shows a list of vendors belonging to that plant.


Make any changes if necessary in the vendor class else press New Entries tab
more vendors.

Page | 666

to add

MM COURSE 1

1.3. New entries: Overview of Added Entries:

Fill the required fields and click Enter. Data will be saved.

Page | 667

MM COURSE 1

Page | 668

MM COURSE 1

4. Price Info Record


1.

MM-ME11-Info Record-Create

Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview


Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option of
storing information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.

Input - Required Fields


Vendor
Material
Purchasing Organization
Plant

Field Value / Comments


Vendor Number
Material Number
Purchasing Organization Number
Plant Number

Output - Results

Comments
System Generates a Info record number

Info Record Creates

Page | 669

MM COURSE 1
Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Info Record>Create
ME11

Page | 670

MM COURSE 1
Create Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below

Vendor
Materi
al
Purchasing
Org
Plant
Info
Category

Field Name
Vendor

Description
Vendor Number

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Type the vendor code or call
F4 to select the vendor
Material
Material Number
R
Type the material code or call
F4 to select material
Purchasing Purchasing Organization
R
Type the respective Purchasing
Org.
org or call F4 to select the
purchasing org
Plant
Plant number
R
Type the respective plant code
or call F4 to select your plant
Info
Specifies the type of info
R
Select the appropriate category
Category
record
e.g. standard
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 671

Comments

MM COURSE 1
On the screen, Create Info Record: General Data Screen

In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Material
group.
There are some other fields also available with optional entries in this General Data screen.

Page | 672

MM COURSE 1
Field Name
1st,2nd,3rd
Rem./Expe
d.
Vendor
material no
Telephone

Description
No of days for
reminder/Expediter
Material number used by the
vendor
Vendors Telephone number

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Mention no of days as
reminder

Type the vendor material code


if any
O
Type the vendor telephone
number
Order Unit Specifies the unit of measure
R
Base unit of measure or the
in which the material is
order unit is defaulted from
ordered
material master
Conversion Denominator for conversion
R
Enter the number of units of
of order unit to base unit
the alternative unit of measure
(denominator) that corresponds
to the number of units of the
base unit of measure
(numerator).
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 673

Comments

MM COURSE 1
1.4

On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page | 674

MM COURSE 1

Field Name
Pl. Deliv.
Time
Standard
Qty

Description
Planned Delivery time in
Days
Standard Purchase order
quantity

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Type the number of days
needed to obtain the material
R
Type the quantity of the
material that is normally
ordered from this vendor
specified in this info record
Net Price
Net price in purchasing info
R
The price is automatically
record
determined by the system, but
you can also overwrite this
price
Purchasing Key for a buyer or group of
R
Type the respective purchasing
Group
buyers responsible for
group or call F4 to select
purchasing activities
appropriate pur group
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 675

Comments

MM COURSE 1

1.5.

On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Field Name
Quotation

Quotation
from

Description
Number of vendors
quotation. The specification is
for information only
Date of vendors quotation.
The specification is for
information only

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Type the vendor quotation

Type the vendor quotation date

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 676

Comments

MM COURSE 1
1.6

On screen Create Info record : Text overview

Page | 677

MM COURSE 1

Field Name
Info Record
note
Purchase
order Text

Description
A text that describes the
object to which it refers in
greater detail.
A text that describes the
object to which it refers in
greater detail.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Type the necessary description
to describe in greater details

Type the necessary description


to describe in greater details

Comments

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Now select the icon

at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.

System will generate a new info record number


at the bottom of the screen.

Page | 678

MM COURSE 1
2.

MM-ME12-Info Record-Change

Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview


Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option of
storing information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.
Under this change transaction we can change the maintained data of an existing purchasing Info record.

Input - Required Fields


Vendor
Material
Purchasing Organization
Plant
Info Record

Field Value / Comments


Vendor Number
Material Number
Purchasing Organization Number
Plant Number
Number of Purchasing Info Record

Output - Results

Comments
System will change the Info record

Info Record Creates

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Info Record>Change
ME12

Page | 679

MM COURSE 1

Page | 680

MM COURSE 1

Change Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below

Vendor
Materi
al
Purchasing
Org
Plant
Info
Record

Info
Category

Page | 681

MM COURSE 1
Field Name
Vendor

Description
Vendor Number

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Type the vendor code or call
F4 to select the vendor
Material
Material Number
R
Type the material code or call
F4 to select material
Purchasing Purchasing Organization
R
Type the respective Purchasing
Org.
org or call F4 to select the
purchasing org
Plant
Plant number
R
Type the respective plant code
or call F4 to select your plant
Info Record Number of purchasing Info
R
Specify the Purchasing info
record
record number in which you
would like to make changes
Info
Specifies the type of info
R
Select the appropriate category
Category
record
e.g. standard
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 682

Comments

MM COURSE 1

On the screen, Change Info Record: General Data Screen

Page | 683

MM COURSE 1

In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Material
group as encircled and highlighted with red color in the above screen shot.
You can make the changes of the following mentioned fields in the General data Screen.
Field Name
1st,2nd,3rd
Rem./Expe
d.
Vendor
material no
Telephone

Description
No of days for
reminder/Expediter
Material number used by the
vendor
Vendors Telephone number

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


You can change the no of days
as reminder

Change the vendor material


code if any
O
Change the vendor telephone
number
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 684

Comments

MM COURSE 1

1.5

On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page | 685

MM COURSE 1

Field Name
Pl. Deliv.
Time

Description
Planned Delivery time in
Days

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Change the number of days
needed to obtain the material if
required
Standard
Standard Purchase order
O
Change the quantity of the
Qty
quantity
material that is normally
ordered from this vendor
specified in this info record if
required
Purchasing Key for a buyer or group of
O
Change the respective
Group
buyers responsible for
purchasing group or call F4 to
purchasing activities
select appropriate pur group
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 686

Comments

MM COURSE 1
1.5.

On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Field Name
Quotation

Quotation
from

Description
Number of vendors
quotation. The specification is
for information only
Date of vendors quotation.
The specification is for
information only

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Change the vendor quotation

Change the vendor quotation


date

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 687

Comments

MM COURSE 1
1.6

On screen Change Info record : Text overview

Page | 688

MM COURSE 1

Field Name
Info Record
note
Purchase
order Text

Description
A text that describes the
object to which it refers in
greater detail.
A text that describes the
object to which it refers in
greater detail.

R/O/C
O

User Action and Values


Change or type the necessary
description to describe in
greater details
Change or type the necessary
description to describe in
greater details

Comments

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Now select the icon

at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.

System will generate a message


that purchasing info record changed.

with stating

Page | 689

MM COURSE 1
3.

MM-ME13-Info Record-Display

Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.

Business Process Description Overview


Display allows one material number to be used for displaying Info Record which is already created.
Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Info Record.

Input - Required Fields


Vendor
Material
Purchasing Organization
Plant
Info Record

Field Value / Comments


Vendor Number
Material Number
Purchasing Organization Number
Plant Number
Info Record Number

Output - Results

Comments

Info Record Displays

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Info Record>Display
ME13

Page | 690

MM COURSE 1

Display Info Record List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:

Field Name
Vendor

Description
Vendor Number

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Number known or via matchcode
Material
Material Number
R
Number known or via matchcode
Purchasing Purchasing Organization
R
Number known or via matchOrg.
code
Plant
Plant number
R
Number known or via matchcode
Info Record Info Record Number
R
Number known or via matchcode
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 691

Comments

MM COURSE 1

On screen, Display Info Record: General Data Screen:

The following fields will be displayed:


Field Name
Info Record
Vendor
Material

Description
Info Record Number
Vendor Number
Material Master

R/O/C
R
C
R

User Action and Values


Displays
Defaults from Initial Screen

Page | 692

Comments

MM COURSE 1

1.6

On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1

Page | 693

MM COURSE 1

1.5.

On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2

Page | 694

MM COURSE 1

5. Source List
1.

MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain

Overview

To maintain list of vendors on material group level which will be used as an information about probable
source for procuring material pertaining to that material group.

Business Process Description Overview


A source list specifies all the sources of supply of a specific material.
This source list will be used just as a reference to have list of all the vendors who supply materials
pertaining to that material group.

Input - Required Fields


Material

Field Value / Comments


Material Master number (Same as Material group no.)

Plant

Receiving Plant

Valid from

Date the vendor starts being a valid source

Valid to

Dates vendor stops being a valid source

Vendor
Pur. Org

Suppliers which supply materials belonging to the material group


to which this dummy material relates.
Purchasing Organization

Output - Results
Source List

Comments
Source of supply for specific material within Plant

Page | 695

MM COURSE 1
Tips and Tricks

A source list is specific to each plant. A separate list needs to be maintained for each plant for each
material. (Note: the plant is a mandatory field when creating a source list).

Business Process Procedure Detail

Access Maintain Source Lists manually by:


Via Menus

Via Transaction Code

(a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master


Data>Source List>Maintain
(b) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Foreign
Trade/Customs>General Foreign Trade
Processing>Environment>Purchase
Import>Purchasing>Master Data>Source List>Maintain
(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing
>Master Data>Source List>Maintain
ME01

On Maintain Source List: Initial Screen:

Field Name

Description

Material

Material Master
Number

Plant

Receiving Plant

R/O
/C
R

User Action and


Values
Material master
number known or
via match-code
Enter receiving plant
number

Comments

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 696

MM COURSE 1

Enter.

On Maintain Source List: Overview Screen:

Field Name
Material
Plant
Valid From

Vendor

Description
Material Master Number
Receiving Plant
Date vendor starts being a
valid source
Dates vendor stops being a
valid source
Vendor name / number

Pur. Org

Purchasing Organization

Valid to

R/O/C *
R
R
R

User Action and Values


Defaults from Initial Screen
Defaults from Initial Screen
Enter the date

Enter date

Enter the known vendor


number or search via matchcode
Please refer the attached
annexure

(* R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional)


Enter & Save.

Page | 697

Comments

MM COURSE 1

2.

MM-ME03-Source List-Display

Overview
Supply source information maintained on material group level is required.

Business Process Description Overview


Display allows one material number to be used for displaying source list which is already created.
Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Source Lists

Input - Required Fields


Material
Plant

Field Value / Comments


Material Number
Plant Number

Output - Results
Source List Displays

Comments

Procedural Steps

On Access Display Function by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Source List>Display
ME03

Page | 698

MM COURSE 1

Display Source List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:

Field Name
Material

Description
Material Number

R/O/C
R

User Action and Values


Number known or via matchcode
Plant
Plant number
R
Number known or via matchcode
(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)

Page | 699

Comments

MM COURSE 1

On screen, Display Source List: Overview Screen: enter information in table below:

The following fields will be displayed:


Field Name
Description
Material
Material Master
Plant
Receiving Plant
Valid From Date vendor starts being a
valid source
Valid to
Dates vendor stops being a
valid source
Pur. Org
Purchasing Organization
Vendor

Vendor Master

R/O/C
R
R
R

User Action and Values


Defaults from Initial Screen
Defaults from Initial Screen
Displays the date

Displays date

Displays Purchasing
Organization code
Displays Vendor

Page | 700

Comments

MM COURSE 1
3.

MM-ME0M-Source List for Material

Overview
Creating possible sources of supply for a material
Business Process Procedure Overview
Source lists records are used in determining the effective source of a material. Source determination is the
process of assigning a particular source of supply to a purchase requisition or vice versa. A source list
specifies the possible sources of supply for a material over a given period of time. It shows the time
period in which a material may be ordered from a given vendor or under a certain long term purchase
agreement. The system can generate a source list for a material automatically. A source list is created.

Input Required Fields


Material
Plant

Field Value/Comments

Output - Results
Source List

Procedural Steps

Access transaction by:

Via Menus
Via Transaction Code

a) Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master


Data> Source List > List Displays> By Material
ME0M

Page | 701

MM COURSE 1
On screen Source List for Material, enter information in the fields as specified in
the table below:

Field Name
Material

Description
Material
Master Record

R/O/C
R

Plant

Plant
Name/Number

User Action and Values


Enter Material Number(s)

Enter Plant(s)

Comments
If no material code is given,
system will take all the
materials as per selection
criteria given for plants in
plant fields.
If no plant is given, system
will take all the plants as per
selection criteria given for
materials in material fields.

From menu path choose:


PROGRAM>EXECUTE

(Note: On above table, in column R/O/C; R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional)

Page | 702

MM COURSE 1

1.3 Once the program is executed, Click Source List button

1.4.1

Once the program is executed, the system returns the source list for the material(s) selected.

1.5

Save it.

Page | 703

You might also like